TABLE OF CONTENTS - Dealer E

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Dealer E
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — Manual Transmission
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .17
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ “Child-Protection” Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Using The Panic Alarm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .27
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .27
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .42
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .72
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Ignition Key Position
Vehicle Key
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
13
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transaxle—If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
15
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sentry Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed.
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — Manual
Transmission Only
Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a
passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering
the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel
is moved no more than 1/2 turn in either direction and
the key is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel
will lock.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
17
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver door panel.
Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
Power Door Lock Switches
Automatic Door Locks—If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Ignition Key Position
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
Ignition Key Position
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
2
Inserting Ignition Key
Child Protection Door Lock Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Three Button Transmitter
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
maximum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
25
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in
the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles
perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ⬙Personal Settings⬙ in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped
vehicles perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
27
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
11. A single chime will be heard.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior
lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until 3
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
alarm has been on for 3 minutes the alarm will shut off
immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To set the alarm:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the door key, power door
lock switch, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all
doors.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
31
To disarm the system:
Unlock a front door/liftgate using the Keyless Entry
Transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
invalid key will trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors. The central locking/unlocking feature (if
equipped) can also be activated from the liftgate key
cylinder.
Door Lock Plunger
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
NOTE: Although the liftgate has no inside release
mechanism, the liftgate trim panel includes an opening
with a snap-in cap that provides access to release the
latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction.
WARNING!
Liftgate Latch Location
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction, or the
remote transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock
models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate
open with one fluid motion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
Power Window Switch Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for 45 seconds after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
35
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Lock Out Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of
the instrument panel.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
37
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
2
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Positioning Lap Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
41
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a three
point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle, which allows
the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini buckle and shoulder belt can
then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel
for added convenience.
Adjustable Anchorage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
43
2. Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
Mini Latch Stowage
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini
latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.
45
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
2
Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
10. To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Knee Bolster
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
Side Curtain Airbag Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
49
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You
may damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver knee bolster to provide improved protection
for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
“child⬙ category. This could be a child, a teenager, or even
a small adult.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If
You Need Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbag system consists of the following:
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (If equipped)
• Side Curtain Airbags
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
− Occupant Classification Module
− Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
− Weight Sensors
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
53
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
the ignition is first turned on. After the selfcheck, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for occupants that weigh less than a very small
adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
• The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system.
Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of
an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In
this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the
seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a
normal position (with their feet on or near the floor) in
order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back
too far may change how an occupant is classified by
the OCS.
• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located in the center of the
instrument panel) tells the driver and front passenger
when the front passenger airbag is turned off. The
PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR
BAG OFF⬙ to show that the front passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbags. When
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the right front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air
bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
55
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child restraints).
WARNING!
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
• The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. In
this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if
a collision requiring an airbag occurs. For all other
occupants, the PAD indicator light will be illuminated
indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off
and will not inflate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing
infant seat.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Airbag Disable
(PAD) Indicator Light
OFF
ON
Airbag Status
Adult
ON
Child
OFF
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
ON
OFF
and Other Relatively Light Objects
Empty or Very
OFF*
OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
• The Side Impact (SRS) Side Curtain Airbags are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate.
The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The side curtain
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to
children.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
side curtain air bags, do not install a clothing bar
mounted to the coat hooks (or similarly mounted). A
clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the
bags.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
59
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
61
Maintaining Your Airbag System
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
•
•
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
•
•
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when
you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind
of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The
airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced
airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion
needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the right
front passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant
Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front
occupant. This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is
not desired.
You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or
locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be
sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
• The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
litigation
involving
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
a
63
• Seatbelt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
65
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
NOTE:
For additional
www.seatcheck.org.
information
refer
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
please refer to Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in this
section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
67
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacture.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to,
Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions.
Rear Seat LATCH
69
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
73
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
SAFETY TIPS
If you are required to drive with the deck lid /
liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .79
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Lumbar— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Driver’s Seat Back Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 116
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 125
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
77
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 129
▫ Reprogramming A Single Button . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped . . . 138
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ERM/ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System – ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . 141
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver . . . . . 133
▫ “Rolling Code” Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 142
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 136
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Opening Sunroof – Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Opening Sunroof – Express Mode . . . . . . . . . . 147
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing Sunroof – Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Closing Sunroof – Express Mode . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self- Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Tonneau Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Venting Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . . . 149
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 151
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
79
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
3
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
Adjust the Flat (Drivers Side) Outside Mirror so you can
just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror
closest to vehicle with your head close to the door glass.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Mirror Directions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
81
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
3
Mirror Directions
Remote Control Mirrors Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
83
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
UConnect™ Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
85
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
87
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the Country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
89
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
91
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
93
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For command translations and alternate commands in
supported languages, refer to “Command Translations”
at the end of this section.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
95
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
97
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
99
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
• Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or
• Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Setup,
Voice Training⬙ command.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
• smooth road surface,
Voice Recognition (VR)
• dry weather condition.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
101
• low road noise,
• fully closed windows,
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
103
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Star (*)
Plus (+)
Pound (#)
Add Location
All
North American English
Alternate(s)
Call
Cancel
Confirmation Prompts
Continue
Delete
Dial
Edit
Emergency
English
Erase All
Espanol
Francais
Help
Home
Language
List names
List phones
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
107
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mobile
Mute
Mute off
New entry
No
Pager
Pair a phone
Phone pairing
Phonebook
Previous
Record again
Redial
Return to main menu
Select phone
Send
Set up
Towing assistance
Transfer call
Try again
Voice training
Work
Yes
SEATS
Pairing
Phone book
Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Return. Main menu
Select
Phone settings / Phone
set up
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
WARNING!
Front Seat Adjustment
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat to
adjust the driving position.
Manual Lumbar— If Equipped
The Lumbar adjustment is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. To increase or decrease support,
rotate the handle up or down.
Seat Height Adjustment
Lumbar Adjustment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
Driver’s Seat Back Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back
to the desired position and release the handle.
3
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
Reclining Seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button
and push down on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
ignition, you may choose OFF, HIGH, or LOW heat
settings. An indicator on the switch shows which setting
has been chosen.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
This feature heats the front driver’s and passenger’s
seats. The controls for the heater is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio. After turning on the
3
Heated Seat Switches
• Pressing the switch once will select highlevel heating.
• Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after about 30 minutes.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
NOTE: If the high heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within 2 to 3 minutes.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
3
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat
Folding Rear Seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
Rear Seat Folded Flat
Rear Seat Recline Pull
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees
maximum, and release the strap.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Reclining The Rear Seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light OFF. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
3
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
119
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Turn Signals
3
Front Fog Lights Control
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the control lever.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Turn Signal Control
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
High Beam Control
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
3
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located on the left kick panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
123
Primary Hood Latch
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then move the safety catch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Secondary Hood Latch
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
Washer Control
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Mist Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is
left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper
speed.
Wiper Control
127
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward
(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward
(counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18
seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the steering column, push down on the lever below
the turn signal control lever. With one hand firmly on the
wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired.
Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place.
Tilting Steering Column Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
129
To Activate:
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Speed Control Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Manual Transaxle:
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
131
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The HomeLink威 system will be disabled if the
Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the Armed or
Alarming state. The HomeLink威 system will only operate
when the Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the
Disarmed mode.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
HomeLink Buttons
The three buttons for your garage door opener will be
located in the the headliner, several inches rearward of
the rearview mirror. The training procedure is the same
regardless of the 3-button location.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
133
Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
1. Turn off the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
indicator light in view.
Proper Transceiver Training Distance
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
NOTE: If you do not successfully program the Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held
transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or call
toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
• Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to program the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
other device does not operate, and your device was
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
• Press and hold the programmed button on the Universal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming
portion of this text:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during programming.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
Operation
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single Button
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
137
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) – IF
EQUIPPED
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ERM/ESP
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System ( BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System – ABS
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this Section of the
manual for more information about ABS.
139
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
either the “Partial Off” or “ESP Off” modes. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this Section of this
manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
141
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM can not
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
• ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
143
ESP 2WD Operating Modes
All 2WD vehicles can choose the following ESP operating
modes:
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “ESP
Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
PARTIAL ESP
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP Control Switch”. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
TCS portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally, with the
exception of engine power reduction. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would
normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP
Control Switch”. This will restore the normal “ESP On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
ESP 4WD Operating Modes
In addition to ESP ON and Partial ESP (described above
in “ESP 2WD Operating Modes”), all 4WD equipped
vehicles can also choose the following ESP operating
mode:
ESP OFF
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
depressing and holding the “ESP Control Switch” for 5
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After 5 seconds, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will illuminate and the “ESP Off” message will appear in
the odometer. Press and release the trip odometer button
located on the instrument cluster to clear this message.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At 35
mph (56 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns
with the exception of engine power reduction. TCS
remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph
(48 km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is off at low
vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road
driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will always be illuminated when
ESP is off.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
“ESP Control Switch”. This will restore the
normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
145
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. “ESP Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use, only.
NOTE:
• The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
147
OPENING SUNROOF – MANUAL
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
OPENING SUNROOF – EXPRESS MODE
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, the stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
CLOSING SUNROOF – MANUAL
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Again, any release of the switch will
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partial close condition until the switch is pushed and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,
press and hold switch until sunroof has completely
stopped moving.
CLOSING SUNROOF – EXPRESS MODE
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Next, press the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
PINCH PROTECT OVERRIDE
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the close position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
VENTING SUNROOF – EXPRESS
Press and hold the “V” button, and the sunroof will open
to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and will
occur regardless of the sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the
ignition has been turned off. The sunroof operation will
be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during
the 45 second time period.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
There is a standard 12-volt power outlet in the instrument panel and a 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet in
the center console on certain models for added convenience. These outlets can power cell phones, electronics
and other low power devices.
NOTE: Due to build in overload protection the inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use a 3 — Prong Adaptor.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet 12 Volts
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Outlet 115V (150 Watt)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console’s sliding armrest moves forward 3
inches to accommodate shorter drivers. The armrest lid
also includes a unique flip pocket for storing a phone or
an MP3 player. The bin inside the console can hold up to
10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight.
Certain models, have a 115 - Volt (150 Watt Max.) outlet,
to power small electronic devices, located on the console.
For more information on this outlet refer to the section
“Power Outlets” in this book.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self- Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries when snapped back into place for convenience.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Floor Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
3
Press and Release
Removing Flashlight
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tonneau cover — If Equipped
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommodates the reclining rear seat.
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
Three Press Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be
washed with mild soap and water.
155
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are four tie-down loops in the lower trim for
securing cargo and D-rings installed on the D pillars for
securing a net across the liftgate opening. The tie-downs
located on cargo area floor should be used to safely
secure loads when vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Area
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down Loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
from the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
157
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
Fold Down Speakers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Rear Washer Wiper Control
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Defroster
159
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
An optional dealer installed-roof rack with cross rails is
available through MOPAR for added cargo versatility.
Rear Wiper Heater Grid
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Instrument Cluster—Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 196
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 188
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 193
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 207
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio
With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
163
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 218
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, And RAQ,
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 216
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Air Filtration System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 225
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
165
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—PREMIUM
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Location
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump symbol
points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located
2. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, it means that there is a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY.
3. Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, however see your dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
167
6. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
7. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on
while driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
9. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the turn signal lever away from the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine
will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
14. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, there is a low brake fluid level
or there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
WARNING!
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
169
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Transmission Over Temp Light
During sustained high speed driving on hot
days, the automatic transaxle oil may become
too hot. If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on and the
vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the requested
speed. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating
will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
16. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
17. Temperature Gauge
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
171
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
20. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
18. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
19. Speed Control SET light.
This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is
SET.
22. Tire Pressure Monitor Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
condition is removed and reset.
If this indicator comes on, the entire, PRNDL/ odometer,
display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY
and will not be dimmable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Four-Wheel-Drive
This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD.
24. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
173
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
messages such as: door/gate ajar and loose gas cap.
Loose gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer/Trip
Odometer on all models.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door”, and “gATE”
will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional
information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in Section 3.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
If this indicator comes on, the entire, PRNDL/ odometer,
display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY
and will not be dimmable.
26. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
27. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
equipped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
28. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
29. 4WD Malfunction Light
This light monitors the Four -Wheel-Drive
(4WD) system. The light will come on, for a
bulb check, when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
3 seconds.
175
When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the 4WD
system soon.
When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.
30. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display—If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
31. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button, will change the display to the
choices available for EVIC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass heading
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
EVIC Location
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays — If Equipped
• Audio mode display
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmissions).
177
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Gate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Headlamps On
• Key In Ignition
• Check TPM System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
EVIC Functions
• Elapsed Time
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur
if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To
reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC
button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (Reset ALL will be displayed during this 3 second window).
EVIC Button
Press the EVIC button until one of the following functions are displayed on the EVIC:
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
in this section.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
179
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text
and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the
current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel
tank level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to Section 5, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) for system operation.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings
is displayed in the EVIC.
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depending on availability. As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF
EQUIPPED section of this manual for details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
(automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to
unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in
this display until “DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST” or “ALL
DOORS” appears to make your selection.
181
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold
the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a
vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “Off”, “45 sec.”,
“5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make
your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
183
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be set to the zone number on the
compass variance map that corresponds to the current
location of the vehicle.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Instrument Panel. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one second) press and
release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) menu, press and
release (less than one seconds) the EVIC button several
times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted. The
“Compass Variance” message and the current variance
zone number will be displayed. To change the zone, press
and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC button to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary,
with individual long (longer than two seconds) EVIC
button presses for each increment, until the desired
variance is achieved. To exit the Variance Programming,
press the EVIC button with a short (less than one second)
button press.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During programming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
Compass Calibration
The Compass will automatically calibrate if the Cal
indicator is flashing, by driving around slowly (under 5
mph / 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area
free from large metallic objects or power lines, until the
Cal indicator turns off. If during normal use the compass
appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal, you may wish to
calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the compass
make sure the proper zone is selected.
To manually calibrate the Compass: start the engine and
leave the transmission in the PARK position. With a short
button press (less than one second) press and release the
EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
menu. Once in the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu, press and release (less than one
second) the EVIC button several times until “Calibrate
Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A long (longer than two
seconds) EVIC button Press will place the Compass in
calibration mode. The Cal indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle
can now be driven to calibrate. (A short EVIC button
press from the ⬙Calibrate Compass (Yes)⬙ screen will exit
the EVIC Customer Programmable features, and return it
to its normal operating mode). To complete the compass
calibration, drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360
degree circles under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from
power lines, large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.
185
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one
of the two, time or frequency is displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
187
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
REF Radio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
189
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
191
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
193
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
4
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RAQ Radio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
Clock Setting Procedure
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information
16 Digit-Character Display
None
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic_Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather
199
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
CAUTION!
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed.
203
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
205
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
207
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
209
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
4
REC Radio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
211
2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
213
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
4
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
215
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
217
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
219
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Climate Control Location
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The controls are as follows:
Fan Control
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you move
the control to the right from
the OFF position.
221
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you
to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the
control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you receive from that
mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
necessary.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passengers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
223
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Air Conditioning
MAX A/C
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
For maximum cooling use the
A/C and recirculate buttons
at the same time.
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: See “Circulation Control” later in this section,
for proper or extended use of this position.
Air Conditioning
Use this button to engage the
Air Conditioning. A lamp will
illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged.
Once the air conditioning is
engaged, use a combination
of the mode control, fan
speed control, and temperature control to achieve your
desired interior temperature.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Circulation Control
Use this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode. Only use the recirculate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix
or defrost modes.
225
Air Filtration System – If Equipped
An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.
Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a
charcoal layer. The filter will reduce, but not eliminate,
diesel and agricultural smells. The filter acts only on air
coming from outside the vehicle; it does not filter air
inside the passenger compartment. The filter’s normal
service life is 12,000 miles (20,000 km) or one year. The air
filter change schedule coincides with that for engine oil
and filter. As with oil changes, the interval is shorter for
heavy duty service or dusty conditions. See your authorized dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, set mode
to the mix or defrost position. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a highquality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by using the defrost position.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collecting on the inside surface of the glass.
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the
inside because of moisture build up inside the
vehicle. For maximum defogging, press the
recirculation button until recirculate is off.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
Automatic Transaxle (Cvt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
䡵 AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Manual Transaxle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 236
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5
230
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Four Wheel Drive System — If Equipped . . . . . . 243
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 263
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Operation – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
231
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 296
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
5
232
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or
fatal injuries.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transaxle
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
NOTE: If key won’t turn and steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START’” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
233
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
234
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
235
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
Automatic Shift Lever
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of Park.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of
PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of park. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug in the right side of the shifter housing that
allows you to insert your finger to override the system.
The key must be in the ignition and in the on position to
use the override lever. If this occurs obtain service as
soon as possible.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector
in P (Park) position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
237
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
5
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• When shifting into P (Park), firmly move the lever all
the way forward until it stops.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
“D”
• You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or shifter could
result. You must also depress the brake pedal.
This should be used for most driving and provides the
best ratio for optimum driveability, fuel economy, and
performance.
“L” Low
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, the transaxle will ratio up only to prevent transaxle damage or
engine over speed while ratioing down will occur as
early as possible
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations. Automatic
ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the
Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle (CVT) and or
the engine from overspeed and changes down will only
happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling.
239
Autostick Operation
5
Autostick Shifter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
Autostick operation is activated in the ⬙D⬙ position by
moving the shift lever side to side. Moving the lever to
the (+) side will activate Autostick and shift up to the
next higher manual ratio, unless you are already operating in or near overdrive in which case, 6th ratio will be
selected. In like manner, moving the lever to (-) will
activate Autostick and shift to the next lower manual
ratio. After Autostick is activated, the manual ratio
selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display
and tipping the lever to the (+) or (-) direction will cause
an upshift or downshift by one ratio. Holding the lever to
(+) momentarily will deactivate Autostick. Autostick is
also deactivated when the lever is shifted out of ⬙D.⬙ Also,
when in 6 position, touching the lever to the right will
restore Drive ⬙D⬙ position.
Autostick General Information
• If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the
next higher ratio.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the CVT will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
241
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
5
5-Speed Shift Pattern
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in THIRD.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE RECOMMENDED
SPEEDS
IN mph (km/h)
ACENCEL1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
GINE
ERASIZE
TION
RATE
ALL
Accel 13 (21) 22 (35) 35 (56)
ENGINES Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43)
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in table.
SHIFT
4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
243
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.
Four Wheel Drive System — If Equipped
This feature provides full time, on-demand, Four Wheel
Drive (4WD).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
Four Wheel Drive Switch
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if additional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose
traction surfaces, activate the 4WD Lock switch by pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center coupling
allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels. The
amber ⬙4WD⬙ light will come on in the cluster. This can be
done on the fly, at any vehicle speed. To deactivate,
simply pull on the switch one more time. The cluster light
will then go out.
NOTE: Refer to ”ESP (Electronic Stability Program) in
the “Electronic Brake Control System” section of this
manual for additional information.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
slightly on the lever, then depress the button on the end
of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the
floor.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
245
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.
Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
STARTING AND OPERATING
247
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance
or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
249
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING
251
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
253
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted
speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
255
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
257
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
259
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Tire Placard Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
261
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
263
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
265
WARNING!
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
267
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for
more than 3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this
section for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
— IF EQUIPPED
Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Operation – If Equipped
This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning indicator located in the instrument cluster.
• The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 °F (6.5 °C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
269
• The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low
temperature effects.
• The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to
be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 °F (241
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 °F (20 °C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20 °F (-7 °C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will still be ON. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn
OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
271
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a graphic of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
5
Low Tire Pressure Display
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
NOTE: A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
The EVIC will display the “CHECK TPM SYSTEM”
message for 3 seconds. This text message is then followed
by a graphic, with “- -“ displayed for the pressure value
indicating which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
Check TPM System Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Check TPM System Display
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ text message will no longer display.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). In the event
that the compact spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” to be ON, a
chime to sound, and the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will still show the low tire pressure value
flashing on the graphic display. However, driving the
vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) will
273
display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message on the
EVIC. This text message will then be followed by a
graphic, with “- -“ in place of the flashing low pressure
value. For every subsequent key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Lamp” will be ON, a chime will sound, a
“CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message will be display in
the EVIC, and the graphic display will have “- -“ in place
of the pressure value of the spare tire location. Once the
original road tire has been properly repaired, and put
back onto the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire.
The TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC
with a new tire pressure value instead of “- -“, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” will be OFF as long as
none of the road tire(s) are below the low pressure
warning threshold. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
275
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram.
277
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
GASOLINE ENGINES
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
CAUTION!
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
279
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
281
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fuel Filler Door
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
283
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “GASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 lbs. (80 kg)
Vehicle Rated Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . 925 lbs. (420 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes the weigh of your vehicle, the driver,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue weight. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
285
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
WARNING!
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package
content.
287
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note 1)
2.4L Auto/Man
22 Sq. Ft. (2.04 Sq. M)
1000 lbs (450 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with
32 Sq. Ft. (3.0 Sq. M)
2000 lbs (450 kg)
225 lbs (102 kg)
Trailer Tow Prep Package
(AHC)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
291
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
293
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
295
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Automatic Transaxle Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures Due To A Low
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
6
298
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
Hazard Warning Flasher
The flasher switch is located on the instrument
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear
directional signals will flash. Depress the
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
299
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
6
300
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of
this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may
become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
301
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
302
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
303
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose
the jacking locations in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
Jacking Locations
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
304
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off the hub.
Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
305
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
WARNING!
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
6
306
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way and may be damaged.
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and once the engine has started, ignite and damage
the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.
Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place automatic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEUTRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
307
4. Remove the air intake duct covering the battery, using
the two finger screws on the cover.
WARNING!
5. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output that exceeds
12 volts.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
308
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobilizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
8. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
9. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
309
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
WARNING!
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
6
310
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY position, not in the LOCK position.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Automatic And Manual Transaxle
Front-wheel-drive vehicles must have the front wheels
elevated; Four-wheel-drive vehicles must be hauled on a
flatbed truck.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
311
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug
in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to
insert your finger to override the system. The ignition
key must be in the on position to use the override lever.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — Gasoline Engines . . . . . 316
▫ Drive Belt — Check Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Air Cleaner Element (Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
7
314
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Power Transfer Unit (Ptu) – AWD/4WD
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 338
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Fuses/Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Automatic Transaxle (Cvt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (Rda )– AWD/4WD
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup
Lights — Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 361
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
315
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
316
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — GASOLINE ENGINES
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
317
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
7
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly
installed. A GASCAP message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
318
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
the MIL light off.
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
319
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
320
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
321
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of
oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
Engine Oil Dipstick
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
322
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule “A” in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection (Gasoline Engines)
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine.
323
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recommended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
324
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belt — Check Condition
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
check the drive belt for condition.
Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace belt if any sign of damage which
could result in belt failure.
The belt is self-tensioning and will not need adjustment.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to the Engine data Label located under the
hood for the proper type of spark plug for use in your
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
325
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
326
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,
the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
“B”.
327
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
328
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the
battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides battery heat protection and will extend overall battery
life. Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery
damage can result.
329
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
330
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid types.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints whenever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
331
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
332
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide
the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently
place the wiper arm on the windshield.
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the right side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze).
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
333
Cooling System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
7
334
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
335
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
336
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the “ADD” and “Full” lines, shown on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
337
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
338
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
339
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Section.
Fuel System Connections
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Brake And Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
340
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil
change.
WARNING!
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
Transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
in one system will not affect the other system. The
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
341
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
7
342
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid which has been formulated with special metal to
metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked only by a trained technician.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Manual Transaxle
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
correct fluid type.
343
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
• The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
• If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
344
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA )– AWD/4WD Models
Only
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
345
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
346
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
347
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar威 Multi-purpose
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
348
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
WARNING!
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
349
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
350
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSES/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for FUSES/IPM
location.
Fuse and Relay Center (TIPM)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
1
Empty
2
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
3
10 Amp
Red
4
10 Amp
Red
5
20 Amp
Yellow
6
10 Amp
Red
7
8
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
Description
Empty
4WD ECU Feed
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
Ignition Switch Feed
Trailer Tow
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/
Ocm Steering Cntrl
Sdar/Hands Free
Phone
IOD Sense1
IOD Sense2
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
9
40 Amp
Green
10
20 Amp
Yellow
11
15 Amp
Lt Blue
12
20 Amp
Yellow
13
20 Amp
Yellow
14
10 Amp
Red
15
40 Amp
Green
16
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
351
Description
Power Seats
CCN Power Locks
Power Outlet
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
Pwr run/Acc Outlet
RR
IOD CCN/ Interior
Lighting
RAD Fan Relay Battery Feed
IGN Run/Acc Cigar
Ltr/Sunroof
7
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
17
10 Amp
Red
18
40 Amp
Green
19
20 Amp
Yellow
20
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
21
10 Amp
Red
22
10 Amp
Red
23
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
24
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Description
IOD Feed Mod-Wcm
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
PWR Amp 1 & Amp
2 Feed
IOD Feed Radio
IOD Feed Intrus
Mod/Siren
IGN RUN Heat/AC/
Compass Sensor
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
Power Sunroof Feed
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
25
10 Amp
Red
26
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
27
10 Amp
Red
28
10 Amp
Red
29
30
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
31
32
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
30 Amp
Pink
Description
Heated Mirror
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
Heated Seats
Headlamp Washer
Relay Control
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
33
10 Amp
Red
34
30 Amp
Pink
35
40 Amp
Green
36
30 Amp
Pink
37
25 Amp
Natural
Description
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
ABS Valve Feed
ABS Pump Feed
Headlamp /Washer
Control / Smart Glass
110 Inverter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
353
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
7
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
• Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Center Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Rear Cargo/Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–A35LF
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam/High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Light . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Assembly
Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
355
• Raise the hood and locate connector behind the headlamp.
7
Releasing Red Lock Tab
Locating Headlamp Connector
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out
at connector.
Twisting Bulb From Socket
Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling
straight back
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Twist the bulb to the left and pull outward from
assembly.
357
Fog Lights
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
Fog Light and Connector
1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.
2. Rotate bulb and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb off of connector.
Removing Halogen Bulb From Assembly
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights
— Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
Push-Pins Removed
Removing Push-Pins
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the
lamp from the aperture panel.
359
3. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
Removing Socket and Bulb
Pulling Lamp From Body
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
License Lights
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
Removing Bulb From Socket
Prying Lamp from Liftgate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
361
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
Removing Bulb From Socket
Removing Socket from Lamp
3. Pull bulb from socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
Light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for
replacement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil-With Filter
All Gasoline Engines (Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil.)
Cooling System *
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Miles Formula), or
equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
U.S.
13.5 Gallons
Metric
51.0 Liters
4.5 Quarts
4.26 Liters
7.2 Quarts
6.8 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
363
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Mopar威 04884900AB or equivalent.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
87 Octane (R + M)/2
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopar威 CVTF + 4
Mopar威 ATF+4 MS9602
Mopar威 Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent nonsynthetic product.
Mopar威 Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent nonsynthetic product.
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar威ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
366
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Off-road or desert operation.
367 M
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
• Heavy Loading
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule ⬙B⬙.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add, if
required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
368
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspension components.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level (if
equipped).
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake/
clutch master cylinder, and manual transaxle and add
as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
Do not check the automatic transaxle fluid. It must
be check by a trained service technician every 15,000
miles and if required only the recommended fluid
be added. Refer to the section “Fluids, Lubricants
And Genuine Parts” for the proper fluid.
SCHEDULE “B”
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
369 M
A
I
N
T
• Off-road or desert operation.
E
N
• Heavy Loading
A
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your N
C
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, E
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
S
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
• Trailer towing.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M 370 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months whichever comes first.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
3,000
(5 000 )
6,000
(10 000 )
9,000
(15 000)
12,000
(20 000)
15,000
(25 000)
X
X
X
X
X
stowage.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
18,000
(30 000)
X
21,000
(35 000)
X
24,000
(40 000)
X
27,000
(45 000)
X
371 M
30,000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M 372 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months whichever comes first.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
33,000
(55 000)
X
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
36,000
(60 000)
X
39, 000
(65 000)
X
42,000
(70 000)
X
X
X
X
X
45,000
(75 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months
whichever comes first.
Change Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid and Filter
Change Manual Transaxle Fluid.
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or
102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.
48,000
(80 000)
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
51,000
(85 000)
X
54,000
(90 000)
X
57,000
(95 000)
X
60,000
(100 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
373 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 374 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months whichever comes first.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
63,000
(105 000)
X
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
66,000
(110 000)
X
69,000
(115 000)
X
72,000
(120 000)
X
X
X
X
X
75,000
(125 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers )
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
78,000
(130 000)
X
81,000
(135 000)
X
84,000
(140 000)
X
87,000
(145 000)
X
375 M
90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M 376 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months
A whichever comes first.
N
C Change Manual Transaxle Fluid.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60
months.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
X
X
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
377 M
Miles
105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers)
(175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
months whichever comes first.
Change Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid and Filter
X
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
X
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
X
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
X
X
X
Inspect brake linings.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
X
X
Replace spark plugs.
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
X
X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at
X
102,000 miles (170 000 km).
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 378 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I Schedule “A”
N
T Miles
E
N (Kilometers)
A [Months]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(40 000 )
[24]
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
54000
60,000
66,000
(90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
[54]
[60]
[66]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
379 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 380 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
72,000
(120 000)
[72]
X
X
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
X
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60 months.
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 102,000
miles (170 000 km)
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace, if required.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
102,000
(170 000)
[102]
X
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
381 M
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
382
SCHEDULE “A”
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 387
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
384
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
385
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Dealership name
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
386
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
387
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
388
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• Owner’s Manuals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
389
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
390
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
392
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,158
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 327
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,330
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,329
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,74,167
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,170
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 334,362,363
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,247
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 30
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,21
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 12,232,235,300,342
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,236
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 29
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,339
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,247
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,339
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 72
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,355
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
393
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 362
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,323
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cargo Compartment
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Carrier, Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
394
INDEX
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,195
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 219
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,220
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,189,197,210
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,337
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,337
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . .
Crankcase Emission Control System
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
334
345
326
171
152
384
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,222
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Door Opener, Garage .
Downshifting . . . . . .
Drive Belts . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces
....................
....................
....................
....................
395
132
242
324
111
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 129
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 176
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 318,366
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
396
INDEX
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,362,363
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,323
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,73,280,332,333
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,363
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 363
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,174,357
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,363
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
397
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,283,317
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,362
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,275
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
398
INDEX
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,167
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 122
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 132
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,31
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,302
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Key, Programming . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Sedan)
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
15
14
14
24
12
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 167,358
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,118
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,74,167
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
399
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 142
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,174,357
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 174
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
10
400
INDEX
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,122,167,358
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 166
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 174,318
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,241,343
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,344
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,344
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,344
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,387
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Occupant Classification System (OCS) . . . . . . . . . . 54
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,362
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
401
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,362
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,318
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,388
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
402
INDEX
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 255
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 149
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,330
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 133,137,180
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,133,137
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,195,220
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,214
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,195
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 218
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,70
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
403
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,214
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Seat Belts
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 42
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
404
INDEX
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,31
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,189,197,210
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 228
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,264,302
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 129,171
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,330
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 48
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 170,299
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
405
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 255
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,259,389
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
406
INDEX
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,256
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,232,235,342
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,233,241
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transmission
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 132
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,167,358
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 164
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
407
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,284
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 30
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,158
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
408
INDEX
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,332
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 347
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement